‫‪ ‬‬ ‫‪TJS۸۷.WORDPRESS.

COM‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮزش ‪Adobe Audition‬‬

‫‪ ‬‬

‫ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻛﺎري ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ اول‬

‫ﺧـﻴﺮ======================‬ ‫=========================ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺑـﻬﺎﺩﺭ ﻗـﺪﻡ‬

‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ Adobe Audition ‬ﺑﻪ ‪ ٣‬ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪ .‬ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ )‪، ( Edit View‬‬
‫ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﭼﻨﺪﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻩ )‪ ( Multitrack View‬ﻭ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺭﺍﻳﺖ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪. ( CD Project View) CD‬‬

‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺘﺎﻥ ﺗﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﭘﻴﭽﻴﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ‪Adobe Audition‬‬

‫‪   Í A ‬ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺗﻚ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ )ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻴﻜﺲ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ(‬

‫‪    Í  B‬ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﭼﻨﺪﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻩ )ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻴﻜﺲ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ(‬

‫ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺭﺍﻳﺖ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪) CD‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﺍﻳﺖ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺁﻫﻨﮕﻬﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ CD‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺝ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﺍﻳﺖ(‬ ‫‪Í  C‬‬

‫ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﻱ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ‬ ‫‪Í  D‬‬

‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪ ‬‬
‫‪ ‬‬ ‫‪TJS۸۷.WORDPRESS.COM‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮزش ‪Adobe Audition‬‬
‫‪ ‬‬

‫‪   Í  E‬ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ‬

‫ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬ ‫‪Í  F‬‬

‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻛﺎﺭﺍﻳﻲ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‬ ‫‪ÍG‬‬

‫ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ :‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎﹰ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﭼﻴﺰﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻮﺯﻳﻚ ﻫﺎﻳﺘﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺝ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ) .‬ﺑﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ(‬

‫ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ :‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻧﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻝ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ )ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﭘﻴﺶ‬
‫ﻓﺮﺽ ( ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻭ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ) .‬ﺑﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ(‬

‫ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ‪ :‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﻜﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪ ،‬ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺟﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺗﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﻭﻱ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺮﺍﻙ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﭼﻨﺪﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻩ ‪ ،‬ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﻭﻱ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻭ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺭﺍﻳﻲ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬ﻣﺜﻼﹰ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻃﺮﺡ ﺭﻧﮕﻬﺎ ‪ ،‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎ ‪،‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻫﺎ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻭ ‪ ...‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ )‪ (Setting‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Option‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺑﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ(‬

‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪ ‬‬
‫‪ ‬‬ ‫‪TJS۸۷.WORDPRESS.COM‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮزش ‪Adobe Audition‬‬
‫‪ ‬‬

‫درﺑﺎره اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ‪ ) Edit View‬ﭘﻨﺤﺮه وﻳﺮاﻳﺶ( و ‪) Multitrack View‬ﭘﻨﺠﺮه ﭼﻨﺪﻛﺎرﺑﺮده(‬

‫ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪ ، Adobe Audition‬ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺗﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺍﻧﺶ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻳﻚ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺗﻜﻲ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ‪،‬ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ‪) Midi‬ﻛﻪ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﺁﻻﺕ ﻣﻮﺳﻘﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺁﻻﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻧﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﻭ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺻﺪﺍﻳﻴﻲ ﺟﺰ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪ (‪ ،‬ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ )ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺑﺮﺭﻭﻱ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺁﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﭗ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ( ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﻼﺩﺭﻧﮓ ) ‪ ، ( Real Time‬ﺍﺯ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﭼﻨﺪﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺯ ﻣﺘﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺗﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ‬ ‫‪ Edit View‬ﻭ ‪Multitrack View‬‬

‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻫﻢ ﻫﺮ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻣﺰﻳﺘﻲ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪ ، Edit View‬ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺘﺪ ﻣﺨﺮﺏ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﻲ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﻲ ﺍﻱ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎ ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺜﻼﹰ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺑﻴﺖ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﺮ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ )ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ( ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﺵ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺢ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ ، Multitrack View‬ﺑﺮ ﺧﻼﻑ ‪ Edit View‬ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺘﺪ)ﺭﻭﺵ( ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺨﺮﺏ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺎﭘﺎﻳﺪﺍﺭ ﻭ ﻟﺤﻈﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﺎﺭ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﺵ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﻃﻠﺒﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻲ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻛﺎﺭﺍﻳﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻧﻌﻄﺎﻑ‬
‫ﭘﺬﻳﺮﻱ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻧﻌﻄﺎﻑ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﻱ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺩﺭﻙ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺞ ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ‪ ،‬ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﻻﻳﻪ‬
‫ﻫﺎﻱ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮﻭﮊﻩ ﻣﺎ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ‬
‫ﻧﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺯ ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎﹰ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﻢ!‬

‫‪٣‬‬ ‫‪ ‬‬
‫‪ ‬‬ ‫‪TJS۸۷.WORDPRESS.COM‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮزش ‪Adobe Audition‬‬
‫‪ ‬‬

‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺳﺒﻜﻬﺎﻱ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﺨﺮﺏ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺨﺮﺏ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﺮﻭﮊﻩ ﺗﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺣﺘﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Multitrack‬ﻭ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Edit‬ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺑﻪ ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ‪ ،‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻳﻚ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺭﺍﺿﻲ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻴﺪ ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ Undo‬ﺑﻪ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺑﺮﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪ )ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﺘﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻧﻜﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ!(‬

‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﻫﺎ‬

‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﮔﻪ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻳﺎ ‪ CD Project View‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺎﻥ‬ ‫‪Multitrack View ،  Edit View‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﮔﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻴﺪ ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺨﻔﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﻫﺎ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ‪:‬‬

‫‪ ، View > Multitrack View ، View > Edit Waveform View‬ﻭ ﻳﺎ ‪ View > CD Project View‬ﺭﺍ‬ ‫•‬

‫‪ ‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺑﺮﮔﻪ ‪  Multitrack View ، Edit View‬ﻭ ﻳﺎ ‪ CD Project View‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬ ‫•‬

‫‪ ‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫( ‪ Multitrack View ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Edit Waveform View‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﻜﻞ )‬ ‫•‬

‫‪ ‬‬ ‫( ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫( ﻭ ﻳﺎ ‪ CD Project View‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﻜﻞ )‬ ‫)‬

‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﮔﻪ ‪ Multitrack View‬ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ‪ ٢‬ﺑﺎﺭ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫•‬

‫(‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ Edit File‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﻜﻞ )‬ ‫ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ‪Edit View‬‬

‫‪ ‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Multitrack View‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻣﺎﻧﺪﻫﻲ )ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ( ﺑﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ‬

‫‪٤‬‬ ‫‪ ‬‬
‫‪ ‬‬ ‫‪TJS۸۷.WORDPRESS.COM‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮزش ‪Adobe Audition‬‬
‫‪ ‬‬

‫ﻣﺨﻔﻲ ﻭ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺮﮔﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ ، View ‬ﺑﺎ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺗﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﺎﺭ ‪ Show View Tabs‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬

‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻧﻮار اﺑﺰار ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻓﻜﺘﻬﺎ ‪ ،‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺑﺮﺧﻲ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎ ‪ ،‬ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭ ‪ ...‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﻳﺪﻥ ﻛﺎﺭﺍﻳﻲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻟﺤﻈﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﻣﺎﻭﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻛﺎﺭﺍﻳﻲ ﺁﻥ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺳﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺧﻼﺻﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺨﻔﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺑﻪ ‪ View > Toolbars‬ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﻢ ﻳﺎ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭﻱ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺗﺎﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ) ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﺗﻴﻚ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻨﺎﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻫﺪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ(‬

‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ ، rows‬ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺵ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﭘﻨﺠﺮه ﻫﺎ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﺍﺣﺘﻲ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻛﺎﺭﺗﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ ،‬ﺟﺎﻱ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻭ‬
‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺤﻮ ﻭ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻭ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ ‪ :‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺟﺎﻱ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺍﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻋﻮﺽ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﻳﻲ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ ﺗﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﺨﻮﺭﺩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺷﺘﺒﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻞ‬

‫‪٥‬‬ ‫‪ ‬‬
‫‪ ‬‬ ‫‪TJS۸۷.WORDPRESS.COM‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮزش ‪Adobe Audition‬‬
‫‪ ‬‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻳﺎ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﺧﻂ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ )ﻳﺎ ﺍﻓﻘﻲ( ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭ ﻃﺮﻑ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ‪ ،‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﻴﺮﻩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻛﺸﺶ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﻣﺎﻭﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ‬
‫(‬ ‫ﺭﻭﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﻴﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻠﺶ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﺟﻬﺘﻪ ﺩﺭﺁﻳﺪ )‬

‫ﺑﺮﺧﻲ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ )ﻣﺤﻜﻢ( ﺷﺪﻩ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻱ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻓﻘﻲ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ) ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻓﻘﻲ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ‪،‬ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ(‬

‫( ﺩﺭ ﻣﻴﺎﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻧﻮﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻳﺪ ‪ ،‬ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﻣﺎﻭﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ )‬

‫ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ) ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ(‬

‫‪ -A‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﻴﺮﻩ ‪ ‬‬
‫‪ -B‬ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‬

‫ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻳﻚ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ‪:‬‬

‫( ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪ ‪ ،‬ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﺳﻤﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﻴﺮﻩ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ ﻭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ )‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﻳﻞ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫‪Force New ‬‬ ‫( ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﻴﺮﻩ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪﻥ )‬
‫‪ Row‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻳﻚ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ‪:‬‬

‫‪٦‬‬ ‫‪ ‬‬
‫‪ ‬‬ ‫‪TJS۸۷.WORDPRESS.COM‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮزش ‪Adobe Audition‬‬
‫‪ ‬‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺑﺮﺧﻲ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ ) ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ‪ ،‬ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ( ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ‬
‫( ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪).‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺫﻛﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪﻥ )‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻭ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﻩ ﻣﺴﺘﺜﻨﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ(‬

‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎن و ﻣﺨﻔﻲ ﻛﺮدن ﭘﻨﺠﺮه ﻫﺎ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺗﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺴﺘﻦ ﺑﺮﺧﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﮔﻪ ﻫﺎ ‪،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎ ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﺍﺭﻫﺎ ﻭ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻛﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻠﻮﺕ ﺗﺮ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﺍﺣﺖ ﺗﺮ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ )ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ( ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻭ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺗﻴﻚ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻲ ﺧﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﺨﻔﻲ ﻭ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ‪:‬‬

‫ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺗﻴﻚ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻨﺎﺭ ﻧﺎﻡ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Window‬ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ‪  .‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬

‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ‪ ،‬ﻫﺮ‬ ‫‪9‬‬

‫ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ) ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ( ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺨﻔﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻭ ﺑﺴﺘﻦ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﻭ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺗﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﺎﺭ ﺁﻥ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ‪  .‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻗﻔﻞ ) ﺛﺎﺑﺖ( ﺷﺪﻩ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﻴﺮﻩ ﺁﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ‪ close ‬ﺭﺍ‬ ‫‪9‬‬

‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪  .‬‬

‫ﺑﺮﺧﻲ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﺭ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺯﻭﻡ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫‪ ،‬ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻟﻐﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﺩﻳﺪﻫﺎﻱ ‪ Edit View‬ﻭ ‪ ) Multitrack View‬ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺳﺒﺰ ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﻨﺪ(‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻭﻡ ﻭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻟﻐﺰﻧﺪﻩ )ﺳﺒﺰ ﺭﻧﮓ( ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺎ ﭼﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺗﺮﺍﻙ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ )‪ (Selection‬ﻭ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ؛ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻓﻜﺖ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﻭ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪٧‬‬ ‫‪ ‬‬
‫‪ ‬‬ ‫‪TJS۸۷.WORDPRESS.COM‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮزش ‪Adobe Audition‬‬
‫‪ ‬‬

‫ﺯﻭﻡ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ )‪: ( Zooming‬‬

‫ﺯﻭﻡ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺮﺭﻭﻱ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻮﺯﻳﻚ)ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺻﺪﺍ(‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺣﺘﻲ ﻭ ﺗﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﻮﺭﺩﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺖ ﺯﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﻛﻞ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻣﻮﺍﺝ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﻣﻮﺯﻳﻜﺘﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺭﻭﻱ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻲ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﺘﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺯﻭﻡ ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ )ﺩﺭ ﻛﻨﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ( ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﻏﻠﺘﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻟﻐﺰﻧﺪﻩ ﻭﺳﻂ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ‪،‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻴﺎﻭﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺯﻭﻡ )‪: (Zoom Controls‬‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭ ﺭﺍﻩ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺭﻭ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺗﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﺎﺭ ‪ Zoom Controls‬ﺭﺍ ﭼﻚ‬ ‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪Window > Zoom Controls‬‬ ‫‪ 9‬ﺑﻪ‬

‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﻴﻚ ﺧﻮﺭﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻨﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪  .‬‬
‫( ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪  .‬‬ ‫)‬ ‫‪Hide/Show Zoom Controls‬‬ ‫‪ 9‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬

‫ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ﺻﻮﺕ)‪: (Zoom In & Zoom Out‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ‪ ،‬ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪:‬‬

‫( ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻣﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ‬ ‫‪) Zoom In Horizontally‬‬ ‫‪ 9‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺰﺭﮒ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ )ﺯﻭﻡ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ( ‪ ‬‬
‫( ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﻴﻨﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ‬ ‫‪ 9‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪) Zoom In Vertically‬‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ)ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﺑﺰﺭﮒ ﻣﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ(‪  .‬‬

‫‪٨‬‬ ‫‪ ‬‬
‫‪ ‬‬ ‫‪TJS۸۷.WORDPRESS.COM‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮزش ‪Adobe Audition‬‬
‫‪ ‬‬

‫ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﻴﻨﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻢ ﻣﻲ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﻱ ‪Zoom Out  Vertically‬‬ ‫‪ 9‬ﺑﺮ‬
‫ﻛﻨﺪ )ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﻣﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ(‪  .‬‬
‫( ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮ ‪ Zoom In Horizontally‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺮﺩ‪  .‬‬ ‫‪) Zoom Out Horizontally 9‬‬
‫‪ ‬‬ ‫‪ Zoom Out Vertically‬ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮ ‪ Zoom In Vertically‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬

‫( ‪ ،‬ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ‬ ‫‪ 9‬ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪) Zoom To Selection‬‬

‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪  .‬‬
‫( ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﻴﻨﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ‬ ‫‪ 9‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪) Zoom In To Left Edge Of Selection‬‬
‫ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ ،‬ﺯﻭﻡ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪  .‬‬
‫( ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﻴﻨﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ‬ ‫‪ 9‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪) Zoom In To Right Edge Of Selection‬‬
‫ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ ،‬ﺯﻭﻡ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪  .‬‬
‫‪ 9‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ Zoom Out Full Both Axis‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻫﺮ‬
‫ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺯﻭﻡ)ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﻲ( ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﮔﺮﺩﺍﻧﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺧﻨﺜﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻧﻮار ﻟﻐﺰﻧﺪه ) ‪: (Scrolling‬‬

‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻭ ﺩﻳﺪﻥ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﻮﺯﻳﻜﺘﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻟﻐﺰﻧﺪﻩ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺗﺘﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ ).‬ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ>=‪( A‬‬

‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻟﻐﺰﻧﺪﻩ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﭼﻨﺪﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬

‫)ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﻓﻘﻲ >=‪ ) //////////////// (B‬ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺳﻨﺞ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ>=‪( C‬‬

‫‪٩‬‬ ‫‪ ‬‬
‫‪ ‬‬ ‫‪TJS۸۷.WORDPRESS.COM‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮزش ‪Adobe Audition‬‬
‫‪ ‬‬

‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل زﻣﺎن اﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ و ﻳﺎ زﻣﺎن ﻛﻞ )‪: (Selection/View Control‬‬

‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﺪﺕ ﻛﻞ ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻔﻬﻤﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﺮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪،‬ﭼﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪:‬‬

‫ﻫﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻪ ﻟﺤﻈﻪ )ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﭼﻨﺪﻡ( ﺍﺯ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻫﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ)ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ( ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ‪:‬‬

‫‪ ٢‬ﺭﺍﻩ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺭﻭ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪:‬‬

‫‪ 9‬ﺑﻪ ‪ Window > Selection/View Controls‬ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺗﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﺎﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪  .‬‬

‫(ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 9‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪) Hide/Show Selection/View Controls ،‬‬

‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻧﻮار وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ) ‪: ( Status Bar‬‬

‫ﺑﺮﮔﺮداﻧﺪن ‪ ،‬و دوﺑﺎره اﻧﺠﺎم دادن ) ‪: ( Undoing & Redoing‬‬

‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ Adobe Audition‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻮﺗﻤﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ)ﭼﻪ ﺳﻬﻮﺍ ً ‪ .‬ﭼﻪ ﻋﻤﺪﺍﹰ( ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻨﻄﻖ ﺟﺎﻟﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺗﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻠﻲ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻨﺪ)ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﻧﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﺷﻤﺎ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﻨﺪ!(‬

‫‪١٠‬‬ ‫‪ ‬‬
‫‪ ‬‬ ‫‪TJS۸۷.WORDPRESS.COM‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮزش ‪Adobe Audition‬‬
‫‪ ‬‬

‫ﺍﻣﺎ ﻫﻨﻮﺯ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺭﻭﻱ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﺻﻞ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻧﻜﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Save ‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻫﻤﻪ ﭼﻴﺰ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻳﺪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ!‬

‫ﭘﺲ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﺘﺎﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺗﻲ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻧﻜﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺮﺩﺍﻧﺪﻥ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﺻﻮﺗﺘﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺻﻮﺕ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺳﻠﺐ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻘﺐ ﺑﺮﮔﺮﺩﺍﻧﺪﻥ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻋﻤﻞ ‪) Redo & Undo‬ﺭﻳﺪﻭ ﻭ ﺁﻧﺪﻭ( ﮔﻮﻳﻴﻢ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﺖ ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻘﺐ ﺑﺮﮔﺮﺩﺍﻧﺪﻥ) ﺑﺎﻃﻞ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ( ﺭﺍ ‪ ، Undo‬ﻭ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﺍ ‪ Redo ‬ﻣﻲ ﻧﺎﻣﻴﻢ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻳﺎ‬ ‫‪Edit > Undo‬‬ ‫‪ 9‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺎﻃﻞ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪Edit ‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ‬ ‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻟﺤﻈﻪ ﻧﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ‬
‫ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ ، Undo‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ 9‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻐﻮ)ﺑﺎﻃﻞ( ﺷﺪﻩ ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ choose Edit > Redo‬ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪  .‬‬

‫‪: Repeat the last command‬‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﻳﺪﻥ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ‬
‫‪ Edit > choose Edit > Repeat Last Command‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺎ ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻥ ﺍﺑﻄﺎﻝ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﺎﺭ ‪ ٢‬ﺭﺍﻩ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺭﻭ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪:‬‬

‫‪ 9‬ﺑﻪ ‪ Edit > Enable Undo/Redo ‬ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺗﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﺎﺭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪  .‬‬

‫‪ 9‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺎ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻥ ‪ Undo‬ﺑﻪ ‪ Options > Settings‬ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮ‬
‫ﺭﻭﻱ ﺑﺮﮔﻪ ‪ System‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺗﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﺎﺭ ‪ Enable Undo‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪  .‬‬

‫‪١١‬‬ ‫‪ ‬‬
‫‪ ‬‬ ‫‪TJS۸۷.WORDPRESS.COM‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮزش ‪Adobe Audition‬‬
‫‪ ‬‬

‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﮔﺮﺩﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺳﺎزﻣﺎﻧﺪﻫﻲ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ و اﻓﻜﺘﻬﺎ ‪:‬‬

‫‪ -١‬ﺳﺎﺯﻣﺎﻧﺪﻫﻲ ﺗﺮﺍﻙ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎ‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺣﺘﻲ ﻫﺮﭼﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺗﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻓﻜﺘﻬﺎ ﻭ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﭘﻴﺶ‬
‫ﻓﺮﺽ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ‬
‫ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﻋﻮﺽ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ﻭ ‪ Midi‬ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ )ﺍﺯ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ‬
‫‪ (File‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺮﺭﻭﻱ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Window > Organizer‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺑﺮﮔﻪ ‪ Files‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺍﻱ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬

‫( ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ )ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻱ‬ ‫‪ 9‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ )‪) (Import File‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ﻭ ‪ (Midi‬ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪  .‬‬
‫( ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺴﺘﻦ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ 9‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺑﺴﺘﻦ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ )‪) (Close Files‬‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪) .‬ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻄﻮﺭ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫ﺳﻔﻴﺪ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ( ‪ ‬‬
‫( ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺎﺯﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫‪ 9‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﭼﻨﺪﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻩ )‪) (Insert Into Multitrack‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﭼﻨﺪﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ،‬ﻫﺮ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﻄﺮﻱ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪  .‬‬

‫‪١٢‬‬ ‫‪ ‬‬
‫‪ ‬‬ ‫‪TJS۸۷.WORDPRESS.COM‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮزش ‪Adobe Audition‬‬
‫‪ ‬‬

‫( ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﺮﺳﺘﺎﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﺎﺯﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫‪ 9‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ‪) (Insert Into CD Project) CD‬‬
‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻲ ﺩﻱ )ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﺍﻳﺖ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﻲ ﺩﻱ( ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪  .‬‬
‫( ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺎﺯﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ‬ ‫‪ 9‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ )‪) (Edit File‬‬
‫ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ )ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ( ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪  .‬‬
‫( ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬ ‫‪ 9‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ )‪) (Advanced Options‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﭽﻴﺪﻩ ﺗﺮ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ‪ Organizer‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻴﺮﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ)ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﺮﻭﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ( ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻨﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪ 9‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ ، Preview Volume‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﻠﻨﺪﻱ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ)ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ( ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Auto‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﺯﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 9‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Sort By‬ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﭼﻴﻨﺶ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 9‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‪ Show File Types‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩ )ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﺍﻳﻲ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻫﻤﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺗﻴﻚ ﺧﻮﺭﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ(‬
‫‪ 9‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Show Cues‬ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺯﻳﻚ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 9‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ ، Full Paths‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺁﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪  .‬‬

‫‪١٣‬‬ ‫‪ ‬‬
‫‪ ‬‬ ‫‪TJS۸۷.WORDPRESS.COM‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮزش ‪Adobe Audition‬‬
‫‪ ‬‬

‫‪ -٢‬ﺳﺎﺯﻣﺎﻧﺪﻫﻲ ﺍﻓﻜﺘﻬﺎ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﻜﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺣﻀﻮﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻓﻜﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﻢ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻫﺮﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﻓﻜﺘﻲ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻳﺘﺎﻥ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﺍﺣﺘﻲ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻭ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﮔﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺍﻓﻜﺘﻬﺎ ‪:‬‬

‫‪ 9‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Group By Category‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﻜﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ )ﺷﻜﻞ ﺑﺎﻻ( ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻓﻜﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻧﺎﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﻭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻫﻴﭽﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 9‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Group Real‐Time Effects‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﻜﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ‪ ٣‬ﺩﺳﺘﻪ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻲ ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -٣‬ﺳﺎﺯﻣﺎﻧﺪﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻗﻪ ﻣﻨﺪﻱ ﻫﺎ‪: (Favorites) ‬‬

‫‪١٤‬‬ ‫‪ ‬‬
‫‪ ‬‬ ‫‪TJS۸۷.WORDPRESS.COM‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮزش ‪Adobe Audition‬‬
‫‪ ‬‬

‫ﺑﺮﮔﻪ ﻋﻼﻗﻪ ﻣﻨﺪﻱ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻓﻜﺘﻬﺎ ﻭ ﻛﺪﻫﺎ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﮔﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬

‫‪ 9‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Edit Favorites‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻋﻼﻗﻪ ﻣﻨﺪﻳﻬﺎ ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻭ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻛﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫ﻛﺎر ﺑﺎ اﻓﻜﺘﻬﺎ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻛﺎﺭﺍﻳﻲ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻓﻜﺘﻬﺎ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﻮﻳﺰ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻳﻚ‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺖ ‪،‬ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﺮﺩ ‪ ،‬ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻢ ﻳﺎ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻛﺮﺩ ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺘﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻓﻜﺘﻬﺎ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻭﺭﻳﻢ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -١‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﺡ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ‪  :‬‬

‫ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺍﻓﻜﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ ﺗﺮ ﻭ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺘﺮ ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﻭ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻭ‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻃﺮﺡ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻓﻜﺘﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﻴﻜﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﺘﺎﻥ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻞ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺍﻓﻜﺖ ﺑﺎﺯﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪:‬‬

‫‪١٥‬‬ ‫‪ ‬‬
‫‪ ‬‬ ‫‪TJS۸۷.WORDPRESS.COM‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮزش ‪Adobe Audition‬‬
‫‪ ‬‬

‫ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﻳﻚ ﻃﺮﺡ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ‪:‬‬

‫‪ 9‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ 9‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Add ‬ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ‪ Presets‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 9‬ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻃﺮﺣﺘﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻝ‪،‬ﻃﺮﺡ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻔﺒﺎﻳﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﺣﻬﺎﻱ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺬﻑ‬
‫ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻫﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﺡ ﻫﺎ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Del‬ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻫﺎﻱ ﮔﺮﺍﻓﻲ ‪:‬‬

‫‪ -٣‬ﭘﻴﺶ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﻓﻜﺘﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -٤‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻼﮔﻴﻨﻬﺎ ‪:‬‬

‫==================================================ﭘﺎﻳﺎن ﻓﺼﻞ اول‬

‫‪١٦‬‬ ‫‪ ‬‬
‫‪ ‬‬ ‫‪TJS۸۷.WORDPRESS.COM‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮزش ‪Adobe Audition‬‬
‫‪ ‬‬

‫آﻣﻮزﺷﻬﺎي ﻛﻠﻲ و آﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﺧﻲ ﻛﺎراﻳﻲ ﻫﺎي ﻧﺮم اﻓﺰار‬ ‫ﻧﻴﻢ ﻓﺼﻞ دوم‬

‫وﻳﺮاﻳﺶ ﺻﺪاﻫﺎي ﻣﺘﻔﺮﻗﻪ و ﺣﺬف ﻧﻮﻳﺰ ﭘﺸﺖ زﻣﻴﻨﻪ‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ )‪ ، (Edit View‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﺭﺍﺣﺖ ﻭ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ‪،‬ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎ ) ﺍﺯ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻱ ‪ ، wav‬ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻱ ‪ ، mp۳‬ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻱ ‪ ، wma ‬ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺧﻮﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ ﻭ ‪ (...‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻗﺪﺭﺗﻤﻨﺪ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﺎﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺻﺪﺍﻳﺘﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪،‬ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺳﺎﻛﺖ)ﺳﻜﻮﺕ( ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻢ ﺑﭽﺴﺒﺎﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪noise ‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻳﻚ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻧﻮﻳﺰ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺣﺘﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻓﻜﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‬
‫‪ reduction‬ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ‪ ،‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ )‪ ، (Edit View‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ‪ ٢‬ﺻﺪﺍ ﻭ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻳﻚ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺗﻬﺎﻱ ‪ Edit View ‬ﻭ‪ ، Multitrack View‬ﺑﻪ ﺑﺨﺶ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪-1‬وارد ﻛﺮدن ﻳﻚ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺻﺪا ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ )‪ File ÆOpen  ، (Edit View‬ﺭﺍ ﺯﺩﻩ ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫‪Open ‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺩﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮﺗﺎﻥ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Play ‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻔﺸﺎﺭﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺸﻨﻮﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Loop ‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺗﺎ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Stop ‬ﺭﺍ ﻧﺰﻳﺪﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻳﺘﺎﻥ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺷﺪﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫‪ AutoPlay ‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪١٧‬‬ ‫‪ ‬‬
‫‪ ‬‬ ‫‪TJS۸۷.WORDPRESS.COM‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮزش ‪Adobe Audition‬‬
‫‪ ‬‬

‫‪ -2‬ﺣﺬف ﺻﺪاﻫﺎي ﻧﺎﺧﻮاﺳﺘﻪ‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ‪،‬ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫ﺑﻜﺸﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Edit > Delete Selection‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ‪ Edit > Trim‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ‪ ،‬ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ‪ Trim ‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪-3‬ﺣﺬف ﺳﻜﻮت)‪(Delete silence‬‬

‫‪ Edit > Delete Silence‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺳﻜﻮﺕ)‪(Silent‬‬
‫ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Find Levels‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ‬

‫‪١٨‬‬ ‫‪ ‬‬
‫‪ ‬‬ ‫‪TJS۸۷.WORDPRESS.COM‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮزش ‪Adobe Audition‬‬
‫‪ ‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺳﻜﻮﺕ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪  Scan For Silence Now‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺭﺿﺎﻳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK ‬ﺭﺍ ﺯﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺮ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Scan For Silence Now‬‬ ‫ﺭﻭﻱ‬

‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺳﻜﻮﺕ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻤﻴﺰﻱ ﻭ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺎﻳﻲ ﺷﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﺛﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺘﺎﻥ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺪﺍﺯﻳﺪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺎ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﻓﻀﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﻟﻲ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻧﻴﺰ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻛﻤﻚ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺁﻣﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺿﻤﻦ ‪،‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺻﺪﺍﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺁﻧﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Delete ‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪-4‬ﭼﺴﺒﺎﻧﺪن ﻳﻚ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ دﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺟﻮد‬

‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺣﺘﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ‪ ، File > Open Append‬ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬
‫ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ)ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺧﻮﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ( ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪١٩‬‬ ‫‪ ‬‬
‫‪ ‬‬ ‫‪TJS۸۷.WORDPRESS.COM‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮزش ‪Adobe Audition‬‬
‫‪ ‬‬

‫‪ -5‬ﺣﺬف ﻧﻮﻳﺰ ﻣﻮﺟﻮد در زﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺻﺪا‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻧﻮﻳﺰ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻﹰ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺳﻜﻮﺕ ﻧﺴﺒﻲ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻨﻮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻳﺰﻫﺎ ‪،‬ﺍﺯ ﻧﻴﻢ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺗﺎ ‪ ٢‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﻧﻮﻳﺰ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ )ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ‪ ٢ ،‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻮﺕ( ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ‬
‫‪ Effects> Noise Reduction> Reduction  ‬ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭﻱ‬
‫‪Capture Profiles ‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ‪  select Entire File ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ‪  .‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﮔﻮﺵ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﻱ‪ Priview ‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪. ‬‬
‫‪   ‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﻮﺩ‪  Ok ، ‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻨﺼﻮﺭﺕ ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺧﻮﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬‬
‫‪ ‬‬
‫‪ ‬‬
‫‪ ‬‬
‫‪ ‬‬
‫‪ ‬‬
‫‪ ‬‬
‫‪ ‬‬
‫‪ ‬‬
‫‪ ‬‬
‫‪ ‬‬

‫‪٢٠‬‬ ‫‪ ‬‬
‫‪ ‬‬ ‫‪TJS۸۷.WORDPRESS.COM‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮزش ‪Adobe Audition‬‬
‫‪ ‬‬

‫‪ ‬‬

‫‪-6‬ذﺧﻴﺮه ﻛﺮدن ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬

‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﺗﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮﺗﺎﻥ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﻓﺖ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪، File Æ Save As‬ﻓﺎﻳﻠﺘﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪:  (WMV) Windows PCM Format‬‬
‫‪  ‬ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ )ﺍﻣﺎ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﺴﻮﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ‪ ،‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺷﻐﺎﻝ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ‪(.‬‬
‫‪ Windows Media Audio ‬ﻭ®‪: mp۳PRO‬‬
‫ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻟﺤﺎﻅ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﻀﺎﻱ ﺍﺷﻐﺎﻟﻲ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺁﻥ ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺑﻪ ‪  ‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﺮﻣﺘﻬﺎ ﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺍﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺧﺮﺍﺏ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ!‬
‫‪ ‬‬

‫‪ ‬‬
‫‪ ‬‬
‫‪ ‬‬
‫‪ ‬‬
‫‪ ‬‬
‫‪ ‬‬
‫‪ ‬‬

‫‪٢١‬‬ ‫‪ ‬‬
‫‪ ‬‬ ‫‪TJS۸۷.WORDPRESS.COM‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮزش ‪Adobe Audition‬‬
‫‪ ‬‬

‫ﻣﺨﻠﻮط )‪ ( Mix ‬ﻛﺮدن ﻳﻚ ﺻﺪا ﺑﺎ ﻣﻮزﻳﻚ ﻳﺎ ﺻﺪاي دﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﭼﻨﺪﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻩ )‪ ، ( Multitrack View‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻻﻳﻪ‬
‫ﻻﻳﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻣﻴﻜﺲ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ‪ ،‬ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎﻱ ﭼﻨﺪﻻﻳﻪ ﻭ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺎﻳﻲ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻠﻖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻧﺪﻩ )‪ ( Real Time‬ﻭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻭ ﻣﺠﺰﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻫﺎ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻌﻄﺎﻑ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﺘﺎﹰ ﺭﺍﺣﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ‪ ،‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻴﻜﺲ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻫﻴﭽﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺭﻭﻱ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﺻﻠﻴﺘﺎﻥ ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻴﻜﺴﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺩﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻈﺮﺗﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺏ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺒﻮﻝ ﻧﺒﻮﺩ ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﻳﻚ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﻫﻔﺘﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﻣﺎﻩ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺣﺘﻲ ﻳﻚ ﺳﺎﻝ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺑﺮﺳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ‪ ،‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻳﻚ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺻﺪﺍﻳﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺧﻂ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺮﺍﻙ ﻫﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﺍﻓﻜﺖ ﺑﻲ ﺩﺭﻧﮓ )‪ ( Real Time‬ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺍﻙ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ‬
‫ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻣﻴﻜﺲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺭﺳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺤﺎﹰ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻳﻢ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ‪.‬‬

‫وارد ﻛﺮدن ﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻨﺠﺮه ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه ﭼﻨﺪﻛﺎرﺑﺮده )‪( Multitrack View‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ )‪ ( Multitrack View‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﭼﻨﺪﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺗﺮﺍﻙ ﺍﻭﻝ ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ‪ Voiceover‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫‪Insert > Audio‬‬ ‫ﺍﻭﻝ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺗﺮﺍﻙ ‪ ،‬ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﭙﺲ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻳﻢ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ ﻑ ﺩﺭ ﺧﻂ‬
‫ﺗﺮﺍﻙ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻄﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ )‪ ( Edit View‬ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﺎﺭ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻭ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺣﺘﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ ﻭ ﻛﺸﻴﺪﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﻬﺎﻱ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ‬
‫ﭼﻨﺪﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻩ ‪ ،‬ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮﺗﺎﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ ‬‬

‫‪٢٢‬‬ ‫‪ ‬‬
‫‪ ‬‬ ‫‪TJS۸۷.WORDPRESS.COM‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮزش ‪Adobe Audition‬‬
‫‪ ‬‬

‫‪-2‬ﭘﻴﻜﺮ ﺑﻨﺪي ﺗﺮاﻛﻲ دﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﺮاي ﺿﺒﻂ‬

‫( ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺗﺮﺍﻙ ‪ ، ٢‬ﻧﺎﻡ ﺗﺮﺍﻙ ﺭﺍ ‪ Music ‬ﺩﺭﺝ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺴﺎﺯﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ )‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ In‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ )‪ ، (Input Devices ‬ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻧﺘﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ‪ OK‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺗﺎﻥ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﭼﻨﺪﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ) ﭼﻨﺪﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ( ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻳﻚ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺯﻧﺪﻩ ‪ ،‬ﺻﺪﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻃﺒﻞ) ‪ ، ( Drum‬ﺍﺭﮒ ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﺎﻧﻮ ‪ ،‬ﮔﻴﺘﺎﺭ ‪ ،‬ﺳﺎﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻫﻨﻲ ﻭ ‪ ...‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﻭﻱ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺮﺍﻙ ﻣﺠﺰﺍ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ ‬‬
‫‪-3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮزﻳﻚ ﺑﺮ روي ﻣﻮزﻳﻚ ﭘﻴﺶ زﻣﻴﻨﻪ‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺟﺘﻨﺎﺏ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﻌﻜﺎﺱ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ‪ ،‬ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﭙﻴﻜﺮﻫﺎﻳﺘﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺪﻓﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ‪.‬ﺩﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ) ‪ ، (Transport Control‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺯﻳﻚ ﻭ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺮﺍﻙ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﻲ‬

‫‪٢٣‬‬ ‫‪ ‬‬
‫‪ ‬‬ ‫‪TJS۸۷.WORDPRESS.COM‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮزش ‪Adobe Audition‬‬
‫‪ ‬‬

‫ﻛﺎﺭ ﺿﺒﻄﺘﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﺭﻭﻱ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺭﺳﻴﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ) ‪ (  Stop‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎﻳﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﺮﺩﻳﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻳﻚ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻴﺎﻳﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫( ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺟﺘﻨﺎﺏ ﺍﺯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺴﺎﺯﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ )‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺁﻥ ﺗﺮﺍﻙ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺑﺮﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍﺿﻴﺘﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﻲ ﻛﺮﺩ ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻥ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ ) .‬ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﻲ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ‬ ‫‪Punch In‬‬

‫ﭼﻨﺪﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻩ(‬

‫‪-4‬اﻋﻤﺎل ا ﻓﻜﺖ ﺑﻼدرﻧﮓ)‪ ( Real Time ‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺮ‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Multitrack View ‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺗﺮﺍﻙ ‪ Music‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻓﻜﺖ)‪ (Effects‬ﺩﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻱ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻛﻨﺎﺭ ﺍﻓﻜﺖ‬
‫‪ ، Delay Effects‬ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ Studio Reverb‬ﺩﺍﺑﻞ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﺯﺷﻮﻧﺪﻩ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ‪ Great Hall ، FX‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﺸﻴﺪﻧﻲ‬ ‫‪Studio Reverb‬‬

‫‪ Original ‬ﻭ ‪  Reverb‬ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ ، Mixing‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ‪) Original‬ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ( ﻭ‬ ‫)‪( Sliders‬‬

‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪) Reverb ‬ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺻﺪﺍ()ﻃﻨﻴﻦ( ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺍﻓﻜﺖ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺘﻲ ﺻﺪﺍ )‪)( Reverb ‬ﻃﻨﻴﻦ( ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺳﺒﻚ ﺳﻨﮕﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺻﺪﺍ )‪)( Full Reverb‬ﻃﻨﻴﻦ( ﺻﺪﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻗﻮﻱ ﺍﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ‪،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺁﻣﺪﻥ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻛﺎﺭﺍﻳﻲ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ)ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﺖ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺝ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺭﻳﺎﺿﻲ ﺑﺎﻻ(‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﻜﺖ ‪ Studio Reverb‬ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﺵ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺗﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻃﻠﺐ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ ‬‬

‫‪٢٤‬‬ ‫‪ ‬‬
‫‪ ‬‬ ‫‪TJS۸۷.WORDPRESS.COM‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮزش ‪Adobe Audition‬‬
‫‪ ‬‬

‫‪-5‬وﻳﺮاﻳﺸﻲ ﺳﺎده ﺑﺮ روي ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ) ‪ ( Mix‬ﺷﺪه‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ) ‪ ، ( Transport Control‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺪﺍﻭﻡ ﻳﺎ ﺣﻠﻘﻮﻱ‬
‫( ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ‬ ‫)‪ Loop‬‬

‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺻﺪﺍ )‪(Volume‬ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺮﻑ ‪ V‬ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪﻩ ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﻭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ) ‪ ( Pan‬ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ‬
‫ﺗﺮﺍﻙ )ﺩﺭ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻳﺪ( ‪ ،‬ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ )‪ (Reverb‬ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ‪ FX‬ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﻮﺩﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﻳﻞ ‪ ،‬ﺑﻬﺒﻮﺩ ﺑﺨﺸﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻤﻲ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻳﻢ ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪) Move/Copy tool‬ﻛﻪ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ( ﻛﻠﻴﻚ‬
‫ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻴﭗ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ )‪ (Voiceover‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ )‪ (Mix‬ﺻﺪﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ )ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﭼﻨﺪﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻩ( ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮﻱ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻠﻴﭙﻬﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺗﻴﻤﺎﻥ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺣﺘﻲ ﻭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻫﻴﭽﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻧﮕﺮﺍﻧﻲ ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻫﺘﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺳﻴﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﻜﺘﻬﺎ ﻭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪٢٥‬‬ ‫‪ ‬‬
‫‪ ‬‬ ‫‪TJS۸۷.WORDPRESS.COM‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮزش ‪Adobe Audition‬‬
‫‪ ‬‬

‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺻﺮﻓﻪ ﺟﻮﻳﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻤﻚ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﭙﻬﺎﻱ ﭘﻮﺷﺎﻧﻨﺪﻩ ) ‪ ( Envelopes‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﻴﻜﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﭘﻮﺷﺎﻧﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻠﻴﭗ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ(‬

‫‪-6‬ذﺧﻴﺮه ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻴﻜﺲ ﺷﺪه‬

‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻴﻜﺴﺘﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻳﺎﻓﺖ ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﺭﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ‬
‫ﻭ ﻳﺎ …‪ ) File > Save Session As‬ﻫﺮﺩﻭ ﻳﻜﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻓﺮﻕ ﺧﺎﺻﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪ( ﻭ‬ ‫‪File > Save Session‬‬

‫‪OK‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻧﺎﻡ ‪ First Session.ses‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻴﻜﺲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ‬
‫‪ ،‬ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺑﻪ ‪File > Export > Audio‬‬ ‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ )‪، (Export‬‬
‫ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﺘﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻭ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻫﺘﺎﻥ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ‬
‫‪ Jet Audio ‬ﻭ‪   Windows Media Player ‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪٢٦‬‬ ‫‪ ‬‬
‫‪ ‬‬ ‫‪TJS۸۷.WORDPRESS.COM‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮزش ‪Adobe Audition‬‬
‫‪ ‬‬

‫وارد ‪ ،‬ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ ،‬و اﺟﺮا ﻛﺮدن ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ دوم‬

‫ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﻭ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﻲ ﻫﺎ ‪:‬‬

‫ﻫﻢ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻫﻢ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﻲ )‪ ، (MultiSession‬ﺭﻭﺵ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ؛ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﻲ ) ﭼﻨﺪ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻩ ( ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺁﻥ )ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺎ ﭘﺴﻮﻧﺪ ‪ (.ses‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺎﻳﻲ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﻱ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻤﺎ ‪ ،‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﺍ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ‬
‫‪ ،  AIFF ، ogg ،  Wav، mp۳‬ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪:‬‬

‫‪ -١ 9‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ choose File > Open‬ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ ‪.‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ‬

‫( ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ‬ ‫( ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ‪) import‬‬ ‫‪) open‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﺯﻣﺎﻧﺪﻫﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -٢ 9‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ ،‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﻳﻚ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ‪ ٢ ،‬ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ‪:‬‬

‫ﻫﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ) ﺑﺎ ﺯﺩﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻥ( ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ ctrl‬ﺭﺍ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻭ ﻫﺮ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻫﻢ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﺍﺣﺘﻲ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ‬
‫ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺼﺪ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺎﻳﻲ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻴﻞ ‪ shift ‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﻛﻠﻴﻠﻚ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪٢٧‬‬ ‫‪ ‬‬
‫‪ ‬‬ ‫‪TJS۸۷.WORDPRESS.COM‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮزش ‪Adobe Audition‬‬
‫‪ ‬‬

‫ﺷﻨﻴﺪﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ‪ ،‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺁﻥ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ play ‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﻴﻚ ‪ loop ‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﻳﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻫﻢ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ‪ ،‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﻴﻚ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ AutoPlay‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﻳﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻫﺮ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ ،‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺎﻳﻲ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺑﺎﺯﺷﺪﻩ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ File > openAppend‬ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ ﻭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ open ‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺎﻳﻲ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﻲ )‪: (MultiSession‬‬

‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﻱ ‪ ،‬ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺎ ﭘﺴﻮﻧﺪ ‪ .ses‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﻲ‬
‫ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻳﺎ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻤﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻲ ﺑﺎ ﭘﺴﻮﻧﺪ ‪.ses‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺁﻭﺭﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺮﺍﻙ ﻫﺎ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ‪ ،‬ﻫﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﺮﺩﻳﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺎﻭﺱ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺮﺍﻙ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻫﺎ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ )ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ ﻭ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﺘﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻣﺎﻧﺪﻫﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ( ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Insert Into Multitrack‬ﻧﻴﺰ ‪ ،‬ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻬﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻧﻴﺰ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪).‬ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺭﺍﻳﺖ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩ(‬

‫‪٢٨‬‬ ‫‪ ‬‬
‫‪ ‬‬ ‫‪TJS۸۷.WORDPRESS.COM‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮزش ‪Adobe Audition‬‬
‫‪ ‬‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺍﻙ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻤﺎ ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ insert > Audio‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ‬
‫ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺩﻗﺖ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ(‬

‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺎﻳﻲ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪: .ses‬‬

‫( ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻤﺎ ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ File > openSession‬ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪) open‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻠﺘﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺎﻳﻲ ﻳﻚ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪: .ses‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻤﺎ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ)ﻣﻮﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺳﺸﻦ( ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﺎ ‪ ،‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﺜﻼ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺗﺮﺍﻙ ‪١‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ، ٤‬ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺘﺎﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺗﺮﺍﻙ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪ ٤‬ﺑﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺑﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ File > AppendSession‬ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺍﺯ ‪: CD‬‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻳﺘﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ‪ CD‬ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ‪ ،‬ﻫﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻫﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻟﻲ)‪ - (Digital extract‬ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺷﻜﺎﻓﺘﻦ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﻲ ﺩﻱ )‪- (Ripping‬ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺵ )ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ( ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺤﺎ ًﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻮ ‪ CD‐ROM‬ﺗﺎﻥ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﻳﻚ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ CD‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ‪: Open Command‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ File > Open‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ .cda‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﭙﺲ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺳﺎﺩﮔﻲ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ‪ rip‬ﻛﺮﺩﻳﻢ!!!‬

‫‪٢٩‬‬ ‫‪ ‬‬
‫‪ ‬‬ ‫‪TJS۸۷.WORDPRESS.COM‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮزش ‪Adobe Audition‬‬
‫‪ ‬‬

‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﭘﺴﻮﻧﺪ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﻢ ﺗﺎﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ‪ CD‬ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ‪.‬‬

‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ‪، CD‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ File > Extract Audio from CD‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ)ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻮﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺳﻲ ﺩﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ( ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ OK‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ‬
‫ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﻛﻲ ﺻﺒﺮ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻛﺎﺭ ‪ Rip‬ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻋﻼﻗﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺍﻧﺴﺘﻦ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ help ‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻇﺒﻂ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﮔﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻛﻨﻮﻧﻲ )‪: (Current Time‬‬

‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﺧﻂ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﭼﻴﻦ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻫﺮ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﺑﺮﻭﺩ ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﻳﻲ ﺧﻂ )ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﭘﻴﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ( ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ )ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺬﺍﺭ ﻫﺎ( ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻭ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺬﺍﺭ ﻫﺎ )‪ (cues‬ﺑﻪ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻧﻈﺎﺭﺕ ﺑﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ‪:‬‬

‫‪٣٠‬‬ ‫‪ ‬‬
‫‪ ‬‬ ‫‪TJS۸۷.WORDPRESS.COM‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮزش ‪Adobe Audition‬‬
‫‪ ‬‬

‫ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪ ، Adobe Audition‬ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻭ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻈﺎﺭﺕ ﺑﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ‬
‫ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ )ﺧﻄﻲ ﻣﻤﺘﺪ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ( ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻟﺤﻈﻪ ﺍﻱ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ‪ ،‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻋﺪﺩﻱ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻝ ﻭ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺑﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺒﻨﺎﻱ ‪) mm:ss:ddd‬ﻫﺰﺍﺭﻡ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ‪ :‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ‪ :‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ( ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺧﻮﺩ ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﻚ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺧﻂ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ )‪ (Timeline‬ﻣﺒﻨﺎﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ ‬‬
‫ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‪       C Æ ‬ﺧﻂ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ‪       B Æ ‬ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ‪A Æ ‬‬

‫ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ‪:‬‬

‫‪ -١‬ﺗﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﺎﺭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Window > Time‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﻳﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫( ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺎ ‪ -٢‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪)  Hide/Show Time Window‬‬

‫‪ 9‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﺤﻞ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﻲ ﭘﺴﻨﺪﻳﺪ ‪ ،‬ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻳﻲ‬
‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺑﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ view > Display Time Format‬ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ‪:‬‬

‫‪ : Decimal(mm:ss:ddd) 9‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ‪ ،‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻫﺰﺍﺭﻡ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : Compact Disk ۷۵ fps 9‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻲ ﺩﻱ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ )‪ (Audio CD‬ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ ٧٥).‬ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ(‬

‫‪٣١‬‬ ‫‪ ‬‬
‫‪ ‬‬ ‫‪TJS۸۷.WORDPRESS.COM‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮزش ‪Adobe Audition‬‬
‫‪ ‬‬

‫‪ : SMPTE ۳۰ fps 9‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﻣﺒﻨﺎﻱ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ‪ SMPTE‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ‪ ،‬ﻫﺮ‬

‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺑﺎ ‪ ٣٠‬ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : SMPTE Drop (۲۹.۹۷ fps) 9‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﻣﺒﻨﺎﻱ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ‪) Drop‐frame‬ﺭ‪.‬ﺝ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﺎﺕ( ﺩﺭ‬
‫‪ SMPTE‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ‪،‬ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ‪ ،‬ﻫﺮ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺑﺎ ‪ ٢٩.٩٧‬ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : SMPTE ۲۹.۹۷ fps 9‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﻣﺒﻨﺎﻱ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ‪ None‐drop‐frame‬ﺩﺭ ‪ SMPTE‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺩﻫﺪ ‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻧﻴﺰ ‪ ،‬ﻫﺮ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺑﺎ ‪ ٢٩.٩٧‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : SMPTE ۲۵ fps (EBU) 9‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﺭﻭﭘﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ‪ ،‬ﻫﺮ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪ ٢٥‬ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : SMPTE ۲۴ fps(Film) 9‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻫﺮ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺑﺎ ‪ ٢٤‬ﻓﺮﻳﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺗﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﻮﺟﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺳﺎﺩﮔﻲ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ ،‬ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﺧﺎﺻﻲ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻧﻤﻴﺸﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺪﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺧﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﺹ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﺤﻮ ﻳﺎ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ‪:‬‬

‫‪ -١‬ﺗﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﺎﺭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Window > Transport Control‬ﺭﺍ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻭ ﻳﺎ ‪ -٢‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ( ) Hide/Show Transport Control‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ 9‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ‪ ،‬ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻧﻤﻲ ﭘﺴﻨﺪﻳﺪ ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪٣٢‬‬ ‫‪ ‬‬
‫‪ ‬‬ ‫‪TJS۸۷.WORDPRESS.COM‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮزش ‪Adobe Audition‬‬
‫‪ ‬‬

‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﺪﺍ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻤﻚ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪،‬ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻫﺮ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ‪ line‐in‬ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮﺗﺎﻥ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ 9‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮﺩﻥ ﻭ ﺑﻬﺒﻮﺩ ﻛﺎﺭﺍﻳﻲ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﻧﻮﻳﺰ ﻫﺎ ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪  .‬‬

‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻳﻚ ﭘﺮﻭﮊﻩ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ )ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﻳﻚ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ (new‬ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺍﺷﺘﺒﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺭﺍ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﻪ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪:‬‬

‫‪ 9‬ﻳﻚ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺴﺎﺯﻳﺪ ‪  .‬‬

‫‪ 9‬ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ‪ ،‬ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪  .‬‬
‫‪ 9‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪( ) Record‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪  .‬‬
‫‪ 9‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ( ) Stop‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻔﺸﺎﺭﻳﺪ‪  .‬‬

‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪:‬‬

‫‪ 9‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Disable Record Button‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪  .‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺭ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻳﺖ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﻳﺪ )ﻣﺜﻼ ‪ ٣‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ( ‪،‬ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺣﺘﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭﺯ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻲ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ‪ ،‬ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪ ،‬ﺧﻮﺩ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ )ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ( ﺑﻜﻨﺪ! )ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ(‬

‫‪٣٣‬‬ ‫‪ ‬‬
‫‪ ‬‬ ‫‪TJS۸۷.WORDPRESS.COM‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮزش ‪Adobe Audition‬‬
‫‪ ‬‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Timed Record Mode‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Option > Timed Record Mode‬ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪Record‬‬ ‫‪ 9‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺷﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪  .‬‬

‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﻲ )ﭼﻨﺪﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻩ( ‪:‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻤﺎ ‪،‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺗﺮﺍﻙ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﻒ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺸﻨﻮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ ،‬ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻤﺎ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺍﻙ‬
‫ﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻟﺤﺎﻁ ﻛﺎﺭﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻣﻴﻜﺲ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻭ ‪ ...‬ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺧﻮﺏ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ )ﻫﺮﭼﻨﺪ ﻧﻮﺍﻗﺼﻲ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ( ﺍﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﻴﻜﺲ ﺭﺍﺣﺖ ﺗﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻛﻤﻚ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻫﺮ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻳﻚ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﻨﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﭘﺴﻮﻧﺪ ‪ ، .ses‬ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻓﻌﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﻧﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﮔﺮﻧﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﺎﻥ ﭘﺎﻙ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺭﻓﺖ !‬

‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﻲ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ‪:‬‬

‫‪ 9‬ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ In ۱‬ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺍﻙ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ )ﻣﺜﻼ ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺻﺪﺍﻳﺘﺎﻥ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻳﺘﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺳﻤﻴﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺸﻨﺎﺳﺪ( ‪ ‬‬

‫‪٣٤‬‬ ‫‪ ‬‬
‫‪ ‬‬ ‫‪TJS۸۷.WORDPRESS.COM‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮزش ‪Adobe Audition‬‬
‫‪ ‬‬

‫‪ 9‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪( ) Record‐enable‬ﺗﺮﺍﻙ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻮ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺑﻴﺎﻳﺪ‪  .‬‬
‫‪ 9‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﺍﻙ ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﻬﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪  .‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﻔﺸﺎﺭﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺷﻮﺩ‪  .‬‬ ‫‪Record‬‬ ‫‪ 9‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ 9‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Stop‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪  .‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺗﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺳﻮﺭﺍﺥ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ)ﺑﺮﻳﺪﻥ( ﺗﻜﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ‪:‬‬

‫‪ 9‬ﺩﺭ ﺗﺮﺍﻙ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪  .‬‬
‫‪ 9‬ﺑﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Edit > Punch‐In‬ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪  .‬‬
‫‪ 9‬ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪  .‬‬
‫‪ 9‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪  .‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺻﺪﺍ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﻭ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ )ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭ ﭘﺨﺶ( ﺭﺍ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻧﻤﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻮﺽ ﺁﻥ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻣﻴﻜﺴﺮﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺻﺪﺍﻳﺘﺎﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻴﻜﺴﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻭﻳﻨﺪﻭﺯ ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﻛﻢ ﺍﺳﺖ )ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻﹰ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﺖ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﻮﻳﺰ‬
‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩ( ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺖ )ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﺖ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻜﻲ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺻﺪﺍ( ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺍﺻﻼ ﺻﺪﺍﻳﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ !‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺻﺪﺍﻳﺘﺎﻥ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ )ﺗﺎ ﺟﺎﻳﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻟﻄﻤﻪ ﻧﺨﻮﺭﺩ( ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻳﻜﻨﻮﺍﺧﺘﻲ ﺑﻠﻨﺪﻱ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ‐۲ dB‬ﻭ ‪ ۰ dB‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻭﻳﻨﺪﻭﺯ ‪:‬‬

‫‪٣٥‬‬ ‫‪ ‬‬
‫‪ ‬‬ ‫‪TJS۸۷.WORDPRESS.COM‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮزش ‪Adobe Audition‬‬
‫‪ ‬‬

‫‪Accessories > ‬‬ ‫‪ 9‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ Windows Volume Control‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ‬

‫‪ Start >Programs> Entertainment‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 9‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪  .‬‬
‫‪ 9‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺳﺤﻂ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ Properties‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺗﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﻪ ‪  Windows Recording Mixer‬‬

‫‪ Options > ‬ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‬

‫======================================================= ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺩﻭﻡ‬

‫‪٣٦‬‬ ‫‪ ‬‬
‫‪ ‬‬ ‫‪TJS۸۷.WORDPRESS.COM‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮزش ‪Adobe Audition‬‬
‫‪ ‬‬

‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﻛﻠﻲ و ﭘﻴﺶ ﻧﻴﺎز وﻳﺮاﻳﺶ ﺻﺪا‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻮم‬

‫‪٣٧‬‬ ‫‪ ‬‬
Filename:  Adobe Audition Help.docx 
Directory:  C:\Documents and Settings\Bahador‐gh\Desktop\Adobe Audition 
Learning 
Template:  Normal.dotm 
Title:  ‫ﺁﻣﻮزش‬  Adobe Audition                                                                                 
TJS۸۷.WORDPRESS.COM          
Subject:   
Author:  MRT 
Keywords:   
Comments:   
Creation Date:  ‫ظ‬.‫ ب‬٠٧:٢٨:٠٠ ٢٢/٠٨/٢٠٠٩ 
Change Number:  ۴۹۵ 
Last Saved On:  ‫ظ‬.‫ ب‬٠٧:٢٣:٠٠ ٢٨/٠٢/٢٠١٠ 
Last Saved By:  Bahador 
Total Editing Time:  ۱,۵۹۶ Minutes 
Last Printed On:  ‫ظ‬.‫ ب‬٠٧:٢٤:٠٠ ٢٨/٠٢/٢٠١٠ 
As of Last Complete Printing 
  Number of Pages:  ۳۷ 
  Number of Words:  ۸,۰۹۴ 
  Number of Characters:  ۳۰,۸۹۷